(display_line): If lines are continued, restore
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
abfcc168
GM
19** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
20sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
21You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
22
cc181e95
GM
23** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
24on the display using several methods
25
26- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
27a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
28be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
29
30- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
31equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
32
33- By specifying `--line-spaceing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
34
35- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
36the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
37
0daee095 38** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
39an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
40command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
41does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 42
176256a1
DL
43** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
44`make-backup-file-name-function' are provided to control the placement
45of backups, typically in a single directory or in an invisible
46sub-directory.
47
dd0add8e
DL
48** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
49characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
50
699238d9
GM
51** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
52compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
53this behavior.
54
55The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
56compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
57Emacs dump core.
58
59** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 60
7233c5bd
GM
61*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
62whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
63is useful for debugging X problems.
64
65Example:
66
699238d9 67 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 68
100b3cbb
GM
69*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
70visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
71the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
72and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
73visual class names are
74
75 TrueColor
76 PseudoColor
77 DirectColor
78 StaticColor
79 GrayScale
80 StaticGray
81
82Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
83`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
84meaning.
85
86The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
87supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
88`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
89visual.
90
91Example:
92
699238d9 93 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
94
95*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
96specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
97default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
98resource values are `true' or `on'.
99
100Example:
101
699238d9 102 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 103
0d0c76b8
EZ
104** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
105more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
106now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
107
42088c12 108** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 109display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
110shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
111be customized.
c60ea02e 112
31047e0d
DL
113** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
114
b02786f9
GM
115** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
116all frames except the selected one.
117
3261c1d8
DL
118** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
119to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
120
ffe36136
GM
121** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
122the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
123area or with tooltips.
124
559cee90
DL
125** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
126read mail from the menu etc.
127
271b4185
GM
128** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
129a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
130
0daee095
GM
131** Changes in Texinfo mode.
132
133** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
134macros
135
136 Key binding Macro
137 -------------------------
138 C-c C-c C-s @strong
139 C-c C-c C-e @emph
140 C-c C-c u @url
141 C-c C-c q @quotation
142 C-c C-c m @email
143
559cee90
DL
144** Changes in Outline mode.
145
146There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
147`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
148the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
149
404fa7d6
DL
150** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
151groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
152
8964fec7
SM
153** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
154or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
155several other special buffers.
156
39783d73
WP
157** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
158under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
159.emacs file.
160
161The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
162determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
163
d35fce81
GM
164** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
165abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
166`directory-abbrev-alist'.
167
df5a1902
GM
168** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
169is running in batch mode. For example,
170
171 (message "%s" (read t))
172
173will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
174to standard output.
175
a933dad1
DL
176** Faces and frame parameters.
177
178There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
179Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
180`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
181`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
182sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
183for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
184parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
185
186Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
187`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 188`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
189`default' face and vice versa.
190
f77a4a8a
GM
191** New face `menu'.
192
193The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
194Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
195attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
196
a933dad1
DL
197** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
198
199The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
200colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
201correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
202the screen gamma of a frame's display.
203
204PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
205in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
206color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
207
208The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
209`ScreenGamma'.
210
211** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
212
213The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
214Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
215oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
216of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
217the text.
218
219** Emacs has a new face implementation.
220
221The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
222font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
223height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
224These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
225specify a font.
226
227Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
228These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
229under Lisp changes, below.
230
231** New default font is Courier 12pt.
232
233** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
234its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
235it is hollow.
236
237** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
238truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
239foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
240customizing face `fringe'.
241
242** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
243can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
244
245** LessTif support.
246
247Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
248need a version 0.88.1 or later.
249
250** Toolkit scroll bars.
251
252Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
253LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
254configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
255bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
256bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
257Emacs.
258
259When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
260Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
261Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
262Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
263define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
264`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
265
266Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
267a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
268directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
269different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
270system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
271add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
272
273The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
274`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
275This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
276image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
277Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
278
279** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
280
281When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
282widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
283Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
284
285** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
286
287When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
288whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
289defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
290highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
291displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
292whitespace.
293
294** Busy-cursor.
295
296Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
297display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
298
299** Blinking cursor
300
301M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
302terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
303and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
304the group `cursor'.
305
306** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
307
308This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
309generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
310See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
311details.
312
313Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
314have to do anything to activate it.
315
316** Tabs and variable-width text.
317
318Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
319defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
320independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
321Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
322
323** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
324
325*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
326
327 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
328
79dd1637
RS
329The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
330LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 331
79dd1637
RS
332*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
333LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
334
335** Hscrolling in C code.
336
cc181e95
GM
337Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
338`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
339customized.
a933dad1
DL
340
341** Tool bar support.
342
343Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
344how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
345
346** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
347
348Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
349mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
350line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
351about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
352in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
353
354Currently, the following actions have been defined:
355
356- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
357buffers.
358
359- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
360M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
361
362- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
363
559cee90 364- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
365toggles the read-only status.
366
367- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
368
369** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
370
371When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 372from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
373non-nil.
374
375** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
376
377Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
378Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
379the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
380italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
381Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
382attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
383
384** Sound support
385
386Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
387(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
388Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
389(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
390to enable sound support.
391
392** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
393the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
394forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
395value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
396users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
397even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
398
399The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
400
401** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
402
403As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
404drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
405`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
406
407** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
408bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
409
410This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
411`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
412variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
413
414** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
415
416When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
417value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
418number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
419fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
420
421When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
422value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
423number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
424fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
425
426** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
427notably at the end of lines.
428
429All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
430spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
431
eee54b0e
DL
432There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
433
a933dad1
DL
434** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
435query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
436after each match to get the replacement text.
437
438** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
439
440If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
441longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
442on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
443by setting the following variable:
444
445- User option: max-mini-window-height
446
447Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
448fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
449specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
450
451Default is 0.25.
452
0d43b60d
GM
453** Changes to hideshow.el
454
455Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
456selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
457
458*** Generalized block selection and traversal
459
460A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
461(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
462which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
463`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
464point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
465(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
466
467If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
468i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
469backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
470the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
471
472*** Isearch support for updating mode line
473
474During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
475blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
476line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
477portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
478is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
479
480To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
481something like this in your .emacs.
482
483 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
484 (lambda ()
485 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
486
559cee90
DL
487** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
488
489If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
490entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
491log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
492
493New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
494buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
495
496Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
497if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
498
499The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
500expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
501cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
502a file.
503
3476b54a
GM
504** Changes in Font Lock
505
506*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
507font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
508mode.
509
b3b98592
GM
510** Comint (subshell) changes
511
512Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
513and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
514
515The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
516buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
517buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
518
519The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
520M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
521the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
522
e26cec67
GM
523** Changes to Rmail mode
524
c0510d27
GM
525*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
526set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
527receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
528recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
529`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
530as correspondent.
531
532Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
533mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
534regexp matching your mail adresses.
535
3b55acc9
GM
536*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
537to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
538Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
539with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
540for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
541
6a1950ec
GM
542*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
543like `j'.
544
5bb6f079
RS
545*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
546specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 547digest message.
e26cec67 548
400a1ed0
GM
549** Changes to TeX mode
550
551The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
552`latex-mode'.
553
a933dad1
DL
554** Changes to RefTeX mode
555
556*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
557 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
558 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
559 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
560 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
561 can be edited from that buffer.
562
563*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
564 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
565 `A' to use all marked entries).
566
567*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
568 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
569
570*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
571 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
572 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
573 been cited.
574
38de9631
GM
575** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
576The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
577semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
578in column 1 are always made leaves.
579
a933dad1
DL
580** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
581has the following new features:
582
583*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
584may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
585to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
586time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
587
588*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
589feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
590file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
591compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
592pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
593defaults to 1.
594
595** Tooltips.
596
597Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
598mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
599can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
600
601Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
602variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
603the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
604tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
605
606** Customize changes
607
608*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
609`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
610cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
611
612*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
613Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
614default).
615
0ae51efb
GM
616*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
617between custom options. Example:
618
619 (defcustom default-input-method nil
620 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
621 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
622 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
623 :group 'mule
624 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
625 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
626
627This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
628current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
629first in a custom-set-variables statement.
630
a933dad1
DL
631** New features in evaluation commands
632
633The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
634modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
635print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
636customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
637eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
638
a933dad1
DL
639** Dired changes
640
641*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
642command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
643is, delete only empty directories.
644
645*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
646command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
647copy directories recursively.
648
f6737cde
GM
649*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
650in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
651the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
652
a933dad1
DL
653** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
654use the -f option when sending mail.
655
b1c609b1
GM
656** CC mode changes.
657
658Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
659current user setups (although it's believed that these
660incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
661However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
662back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
663compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
664release.
665
666*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
667When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
668variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
669take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
670is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
671settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
672possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
673Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
674
675By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
676special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
677the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
678of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
679above.
680
681Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
682when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
683function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
684call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
685then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
686values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
687only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
688function documentation for more info.
689
690The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
691especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
692with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
693intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
694such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
695is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
696configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
697global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
698
699(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
700
701**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
702This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
703
704This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
705variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
706completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
707the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
708empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
709style system.
710
711**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
712In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
713c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
714as far as possible.
715
716*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
717CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
718surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
719chapter about this in the manual.
720
721**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
722The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
723recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
724primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
725adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
726
727**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
728This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
729c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
730
731**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
732This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
733
734It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
735Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
736A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
737inside CC Mode.
738
739Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
740causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
741the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
742available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
743cc-mode/).
744
745**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
746The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
747specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
748literals.
749
750**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
751It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
752prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
753you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
754this function.
755
756*** Fixes to IDL mode.
757It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
758to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
759struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
760Thanks to Eric Eide.
761
762*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
763It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
764opening braces hangs and when they don't.
765
766**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
767
768*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
769See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
770better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
771and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
772
773*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
774previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
775the column specified by comment-column.
776
777*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
778In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
779is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
780prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
781contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
782don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
783
784*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
785instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
786arguments.
787
788*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
789
790*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
791c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
792c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
793variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
794Provan).
795
796*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
797
c407c570
GM
798** Makefile mode changes
799
800*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
801
802*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
803Fontlock mode is active.
804
87be76f6
GM
805** Isearch changes
806
c407c570
GM
807** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
808respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
809that started the search.
810
87be76f6 811*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
812selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
813
87be76f6
GM
814*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
815
d35fce81 816Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
817`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
818search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
819before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
820highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
821`secondary-selection'.
822
823The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
824will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
825Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
826using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
827usual snappy response.
828
829If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
830matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
831set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
832isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
833
35384f06
GM
834** Changes in sort.el
835
836The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 837as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
838new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
839numeric base.
87be76f6 840
d7b511c4
GM
841** Changes to Ange-ftp
842
843*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
844names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
845sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
846
d7b511c4
GM
847*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
848ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
849
4b9347b3
GM
850** Shell script mode changes.
851
852Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
853derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
854sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
855
79214ddf
FP
856** Etags changes.
857
858*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
859
aca0be23 860*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
861possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
862{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
863This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
864a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 865
79214ddf
FP
866*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
867declarations when given the --declarations option.
868
869*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 870"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
871
872*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
873types.
874
875*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
876
877*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
878
879*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
880are now tagged.
881
882*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
883variables are tagged.
884
885*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
886
8dc78b52
FP
887*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
888for PSWrap.
79214ddf 889
f6737cde
GM
890** Changes in etags.el
891
3f6e4b8b
GM
892*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
893tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
894is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
895
f6737cde
GM
896*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
897the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
898
899If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
900FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
901TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
902obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
903
904TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
905
906FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
907List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
908
909A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
910
911 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
912 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
913 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
914
915*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
916of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
917
918*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
919names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
920
fbc164de
PE
921** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
922and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
923LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
924
59c1bf85
DL
925** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
926These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
927(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
928currently no specific input method support for them.
929
e33b0397
DL
930** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
931remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
932appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
933
934** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
935
6f8ea2ae
DL
936** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
937
c0510d27
GM
938** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
939containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
940expression from that list, are not checked.
941
a933dad1
DL
942** New modes and packages
943
5e5dff44
GM
944*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
945authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
946
947The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
948the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
949the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
950Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
951even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
952single step.
953
954On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
955matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
956probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
957contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
958
f7136ee8
GM
959*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
960unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
961actually modifying content of a buffer.
962
bbd9b566
GM
963*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
964PostScript.
965
966Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
967
968The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
969
970 ; comment (until end of line)
971 A non-terminal
972 "C" terminal
973 ?C? special
974 $A default non-terminal
975 $"C" default terminal
976 $?C? default special
977 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
978 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
979 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
980 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
981 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
982 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
983 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
984 C+ one or more occurrences of C
985 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
986 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
987 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
988 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
989 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
990 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
991 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
992
993Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
994
99453a38
GM
995*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
996align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
997determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
998example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
999equal signs of assignments.
1000
559cee90
DL
1001*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1002paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1003
6448a6b3
GM
1004*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1005list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1006buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1007customize the package.
1008
249652b1
GM
1009*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1010replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1011is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1012and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1013not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1014which answers different needs.
1015
3476b54a
GM
1016*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1017suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1018expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1019course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1020reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1021to be enabled.
1022
8964fec7
SM
1023*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1024containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1025
a933dad1
DL
1026*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1027
1028*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1029
1030*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1031
1032*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1033Pascal) language.
1034
1035*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1036the text at point.
1037
1038*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1039
8d54eb69
DL
1040*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1041
a933dad1
DL
1042*** whitespace.el ???
1043
ebcfda83
GM
1044*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1045files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1046(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1047interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1048often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1049uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1050codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1051
1052*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1053
1054Here is an example of columns:
1055
1056horse apple bus
1057dog pineapple car EXTRA
1058porcupine strawberry airplane
1059
1060Doing the following settings:
1061
1062 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1063 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1064 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1065 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1066
1067
1068Selecting the lines above and typing:
1069
1070 M-x delimit-columns-region
1071
1072It results:
1073
1074[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1075[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1076[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1077
1078delim-col has the following options:
1079
1080 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1081 before all columns.
1082
1083 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1084 between each column.
1085
1086 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1087 after all columns.
1088
1089 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1090 each column.
1091
1092delim-col has the following commands:
1093
1094 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1095 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1096
f507826c
GM
1097*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1098were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1099is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1100
1101The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1102
1103To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1104
1105To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1106M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1107
1108To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1109M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1110
8062f458
DL
1111*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1112text.
1113
36e24b82 1114*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1115of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1116specific to Message mode.
1117
36e24b82
DL
1118*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1119viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1120with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1121
aaa659ef
DL
1122*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1123interface to access directory servers using different directory
1124protocols. It has a separate manual.
1125
eee54b0e
DL
1126*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1127for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1128
612839b6
GM
1129*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1130
1131*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1132minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1133
a933dad1
DL
1134** Withdrawn packages
1135
1136*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1137functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1138
3261c1d8
DL
1139*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1140
1141*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1142\f
1143* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1144
1145Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1146--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1147When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1148so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1149
612839b6
GM
1150** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1151`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1152from which the command was issued.
1153
1154** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1155`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1156`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1157additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1158operate on.
1159
271b4185
GM
1160** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1161to `window-buffer-height'.
1162
1163- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1164
1165Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1166The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1167lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1168
1169Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1170respectively.
1171
1172If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1173COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1174
1175The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1176obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1177on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1178
1179Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1180buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1181possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1182is currently displayed in some window.
1183
3c30cb6e
DL
1184** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1185argument function's results.
1186
62f20204
GM
1187** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1188signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1189
c0510d27
GM
1190** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1191header is the list of headers passed to it.
1192
1193** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1194ignores differences in case and text representation.
1195
1196** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1197cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1198as follows:
1199
1200 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1201 nil don't display a cursor
1202 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1203 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1204 others display a box cursor.
1205
9a0dd3dc
GM
1206** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1207an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1208defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1209set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1210
d7b511c4
GM
1211** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
1212specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to
1213the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1214text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1215
1216Example:
1217
1218 (string-to-syntax "()")
1219 => (4 . 41)
1220
1fa28578
GM
1221** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1222other than 10.
1223
1224*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1225INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1226
1227 #b1111
1228 => 15
1229 #b-1111
1230 => -15
1231
1232*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1233
1234 #o666
1235 => 438
1236
1237*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1238
1239 #xbeef
1240 => 48815
1241
1242*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1243
1244 #2R-111
1245 => -7
1246 #25rah
1247 => 267
1248
3d4ff2dd 1249** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1250the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1251and isn't a string.
1252
3d4ff2dd
GM
1253** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1254a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1255value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1256not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1257
16ce590d
DL
1258+++
1259** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1260
73825616 1261** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1262for a regexp in a string.
1263
1264** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1265`mouse-position-function'.
1266
723e779c
GM
1267** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1268that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1269
d1e103b2
GM
1270** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1271Keywords are now always considered constants.
1272
31047e0d
DL
1273+++
1274** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1275returns it.
1276
7a85e4df
GM
1277** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1278returned by function `recent-keys'.
1279
02b14400
RS
1280+++
1281** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1282can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1283Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1284etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1285mode.
404fa7d6 1286
02b14400 1287+++
8964fec7
SM
1288** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1289and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1290
02b14400
RS
1291+++
1292** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1293has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1294function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1295returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1296been performed."
1297
1298When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1299and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1300hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1301then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1302
02b14400 1303+++
81da8b32
GM
1304** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1305In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1306and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1307
02b14400 1308+++
9e207b90
GM
1309** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1310with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1311specified table.
1312
1313 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1314
1315Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1316TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1317saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1318what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1319
02b14400 1320+++
d7f89643 1321** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1322Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1323
02b14400 1324+++
dde9e75a
GM
1325** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1326removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1327
02b14400 1328+++
9da30515
GM
1329** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1330instead of being optional.
1331
02b14400 1332+++
d20679eb
GM
1333** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1334modify read-only text.
1335
02b14400 1336+++
fbc164de
PE
1337** New functions and variables for locales.
1338
1339The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1340decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1341time functions like strftime. The new variables
1342`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1343locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1344
1345The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1346environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1347the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1348environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1349not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1350`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1351`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1352
02b14400 1353+++
863476d1
SM
1354** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1355To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1356modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1357start sequences.
1358
02b14400 1359+++
ef6d912c
GM
1360** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1361because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1362
02b14400 1363+++
a933dad1
DL
1364** New function `propertize'
1365
1366The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1367strings with text properties.
1368
1369- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1370
1371Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1372by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1373PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1374specified value of that property. Example:
1375
1376 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1377
1378+++
1379** push and pop macros.
1380
02b14400
RS
1381Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1382are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1383as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1384
1385(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1386(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1387 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1388
02b14400
RS
1389** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1390
6c7fd5aa
RS
1391Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1392are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1393
1394(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1395 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1396 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1397 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1398
1399(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1400 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1401 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1402 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1403
a933dad1
DL
1404+++
1405** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1406as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1407
1408[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1409[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1410[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1411[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1412[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1413 space, and DEL.
1414[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1415 and DEL.
1416[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1417 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1418 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1419[:alpha:] matches letters.
1420 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1421 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1422[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1423[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1424[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1425[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1426 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1427 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1428[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1429[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1430[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1431
1432+++
1433** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1434
1435The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1436
1437- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1438
1439The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1440are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1441
1442:test TEST
1443
1444TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1445Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1446it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1447
1448:size SIZE
1449
1450SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1451many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1452
1453:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1454
1455REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1456full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1457size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
14581.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1459old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1460
1461:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1462
1463THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1464hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1465(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1466
1467:weakness WEAK
1468
1469WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1470Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1471their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1472hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1473
1474- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1475
1476Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1477
1478- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1479
1480Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1481
1482- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1483
1484Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1485values are shared.
1486
1487- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1488
1489Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1490
1491- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1492
1493Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1494
1495- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1496
1497Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1498
1499- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1500
1501Returns the size of TABLE.
1502
1503- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1504
1505Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1506
1507- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1508
1509Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1510
1511- Function: clrhash TABLE
1512
1513Clear TABLE.
1514
1515- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1516
1517Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1518not found.
1519
79214ddf 1520- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1521
1522Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1523another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1524
1525- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1526
1527Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1528
1529- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1530
1531Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1532arguments KEY and VALUE.
1533
1534- Function: sxhash OBJ
1535
1536Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1537
1538- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1539
1540Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1541a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1542comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1543and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1544of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1545
1546TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1547
1548HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1549code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1550integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1551
1552Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1553be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1554
1555 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1556 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1557
1558 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1559 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1560
79214ddf 1561 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1562 'case-fold-string-hash))
1563
1564 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1565
1566+++
1567** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1568
1569It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1570circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1571a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1572
1573+++
1574** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1575
1576If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1577#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1578
a933dad1
DL
1579+++
1580** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1581t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1582specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1583is too short to reach that column.
1584
1585+++
1586** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1587now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1588after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1589two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1590
1591If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1592perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1593and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1594
1595+++
1596** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1597to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1598
1599+++
1600** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1601calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1602
1603+++
1604** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1605directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1606small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1607small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1608temporary-file-directory instead.
1609
1610+++
1611** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1612the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1613`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1614hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1615
1616+++
1617** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1618elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1619
1620+++
1621** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1622
1623make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1624creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1625ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1626
1627+++
1628** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1629
1630The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1631on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1632is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1633never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1634ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1635overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1636
1637If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1638that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1639to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1640The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1641
1642+++
1643** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1644
1645Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1646If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1647ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1648result string.
1649
1650Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1651string where arguments appear in the result string.
1652
1653Example:
1654
1655 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1656 (s2 "world"))
1657 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1658 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1659 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1660
1661results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1662
1663+++
1664** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1665
1666Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1667The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1668argument in it.
1669
1670 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1671 (arg "world"))
1672 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1673 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1674 (message msg arg))
1675
1676+++
1677** Sound support
1678
1679Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1680(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1681
1682Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1683(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1684to enable sound support.
1685
1686Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1687list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1688when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1689functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1690sound to play, before playing the sound.
1691
1692The following sound properties are supported:
1693
1694- `:file FILE'
1695
1696FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1697searched relative to `data-directory'.
1698
6fb40beb
GM
1699- `:data DATA'
1700
1701DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1702may be present, but not both.
1703
a933dad1
DL
1704- `:volume VOLUME'
1705
1706VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
17070..1. This property is optional.
1708
1709Other properties are ignored.
1710
1711** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1712
1713** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1714a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1715
1716** Changes to garbage collection
1717
1718*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1719of live and free strings.
1720
1721*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1722strings that have been consed so far.
1723
a933dad1
DL
1724\f
1725* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1726
1727Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1728--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1729When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1730so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1731
f6d3257b
GM
1732** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1733to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1734
1735Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1736text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1737is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1738your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1739laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1740just display it black instead.
1741
1742This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1743a line like
1744
1745 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1746
1747in your `.emacs'.
1748
a933dad1
DL
1749** New face implementation.
1750
1751Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1752font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1753
1754+++
1755*** New faces.
1756
1757Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1758
1759 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1760
a933dad1
DL
1761 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1762 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1763
a933dad1 1764 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1765
a933dad1 1766 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1767
a933dad1 1768 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1769
a933dad1 1770 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1771
a933dad1
DL
1772 7. Background color.
1773
1774 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1775
1776 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1777
1778 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1779
1780 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1781
1782 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1783 color.
1784
1785 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1786 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1787
1788Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1789same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1790frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1791faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1792with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1793attributes mentioned above.
1794
1795There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1796definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1797created frames.
79214ddf 1798
a933dad1
DL
1799A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1800have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1801`fully-specified'.
1802
1803+++
1804*** Face merging.
1805
1806The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1807combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1808aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1809properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1810that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1811results in a fully-specified face.
1812
1813+++
1814*** Face realization.
1815
1816After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1817merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1818realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1819available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1820face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1821cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1822
1823Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1824character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1825for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1826charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1827
1828Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1829specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1830being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1831the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1832statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1833
1834In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1835`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
18360x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1837the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1838initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1839Emacs.
1840
1841Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1842`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1843registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1844with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1845
1846++++
1847**** Clearing face caches.
1848
1849The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1850on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1851unused fonts.
1852
1853+++
1854*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1855
a933dad1
DL
1856Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1857given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1858for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1859
1860If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1861pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1862family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1863property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1864an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1865
1866Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1867against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1868match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1869
1870Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1871
1872The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1873attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1874face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1875names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1876that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1877width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1878to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1879
1880Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1881specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1882face doesn't exist.
1883
1884+++
1885**** Scalable fonts
1886
1887Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1888since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1889servers.
1890
1891To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1892`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1893scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1894Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1895scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1896that list. Example:
1897
1898 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1899
1900allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1901
1902+++
1903*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1904
1905- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1906
1907Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1908is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1909string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1910
1911If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1912the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1913FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1914POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1915SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1916These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1917if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1918REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1919the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1920of the face font sort order.
1921
79214ddf 1922- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1923
1924Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
1925omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
1926(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
1927non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
1928
1929- Variable: font-list-limit
1930
1931Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
1932won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
1933matching font. The default is currently 100.
1934
1935+++
1936*** Setting face attributes.
1937
1938For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
1939with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
1940implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
1941`face-attribute'.
1942
1943Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
1944symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
1945
1946The following attributes are recognized:
1947
1948`:family'
1949
1950VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
1951or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
1952and `?' are allowed.
1953
1954`:width'
1955
1956VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
1957It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
1958`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
1959`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
1960
1961`:height'
1962
1963VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
19641/10 pt.
1965
1966`:weight'
1967
1968VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
1969symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
1970`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
1971
1972`:slant'
1973
1974VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
1975symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
1976`reverse-oblique'.
1977
1978`:foreground', `:background'
1979
1980VALUE must be a color name, a string.
1981
1982`:underline'
1983
1984VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
1985VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
1986a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
1987don't underline.
1988
1989`:overline'
1990
1991VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
1992VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
1993string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
1994overline.
1995
1996`:strike-through'
1997
1998VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
1999striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2000face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2001is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2002
2003`:box'
2004
2005VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2006around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2007VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2008of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2009and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2010VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2011:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2012the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2013specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2014defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2015the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2016color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2017should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2018like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2019that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2020the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2021box.
2022
2023`:inverse-video'
2024
2025VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2026inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2027
2028`:stipple'
2029
2030If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2031The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2032searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2033HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2034is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2035explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2036
2037For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2038and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2039
2040`:font'
2041
2042Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2043XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2044is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2045versions of Emacs.
2046
2047For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2048be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2049must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2050
2051Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2052`defface'.
2053
2054*** Face attributes and X resources
2055
2056The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2057from X resources:
2058
2059 Face attribute X resource class
2060-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2061 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2062 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2063 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2064 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2065 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2066 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2067 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2068 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2069 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2070 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2071 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2072 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2073 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2074 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2075 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2076 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2077 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2078 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2079 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2080
2081+++
2082*** Text property `face'.
2083
2084The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2085specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2086specification can be
2087
20881. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2089
20902. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2091 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2092 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2093 for face attribute names.
2094
20953. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2096 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2097 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2098
2099+++
2100** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2101
acf3ecb7
EZ
2102The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2103on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2104the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2105default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2106`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2107used to clear the mapping table.
2108
acf3ecb7
EZ
2109** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2110
2111The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2112and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2113type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2114color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2115display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2116old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2117`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2118compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2119should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2120modify their color-related behavior.
2121
2122The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2123any frame type.
2124
8a5719f0
EZ
2125** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2126
2127The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2128`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2129`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2130`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2131`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2132`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2133display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2134the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2135platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2136
a933dad1
DL
2137+++
2138** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2139
463cac2d 2140This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2141
2142The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2143end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2144Otherwise, it returns zero.
2145
463cac2d
GM
2146** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2147
2148There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2149buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2150text-property.
2151
9a9dfda8 2152Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2153forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2154to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2155not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2156commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2157boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2158`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2159functions.
463cac2d
GM
2160
2161Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2162a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2163editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2164
9a9dfda8
GM
2165The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2166
2167- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2168
2169Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2170A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2171If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2172constrained position if that is is different.
2173
2174If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2175positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2176ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2177constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2178as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2179is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2180fields.
2181
2182If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2183NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2184unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2185C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2186only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2187
2188- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2189
2190Erases the field surrounding POS.
2191A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2192If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2193
2194- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2195
2196Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2197A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2198If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2199If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2200field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2201
2202- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2203
2204Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2205A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2206If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2207If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2208then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2209
2210- Function: field-string &optional POS
2211
2212Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2213A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2214If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2215
2216- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2217
2218Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2219A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2220If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2221
a933dad1
DL
2222+++
2223** Image support.
2224
2225Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2226strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2227(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2228replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2229
2230If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2231`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2232AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2233window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2234area.
2235
2236IMAGE is an image specification.
2237
2238*** Image specifications
2239
2240Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2241is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2242specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2243symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2244described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2245
2246The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2247
2248`:ascent ASCENT'
2249
2250ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
2251of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
2252
2253`:margin MARGIN'
2254
79214ddf 2255MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2256margin around the image. Default is 0.
2257
2258`:relief RELIEF'
2259
2260RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2261around an image.
2262
2263`:algorithm ALGO'
2264
2265Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2266be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2267supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2268which is intended to display images "disabled."
2269
2270`:heuristic-mask BG'
2271
2272If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2273background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2274determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2275corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2276the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2277be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2278background of the image.
2279
2280`:file FILE'
2281
2282Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2283search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2284building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2285may be present in the image specification.
2286
518df5c4
GM
2287`:data DATA'
2288
2289Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2290supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2291present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2292support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2293
a933dad1
DL
2294*** Supported image types
2295
b246b1f6 2296**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2297
2298XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2299properties supported are
2300
2301`:foreground FG'
2302
2303FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2304is the frame's foreground.
2305
2306`:background FG'
2307
2308BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2309the frame's background color.
2310
2311XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2312case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2313instead of a `:file' property.
2314
2315`:width WIDTH'
2316
2317WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2318
2319`:height HEIGHT'
2320
2321HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2322
2323`:data DATA'
2324
2325DATA must be either
2326
2327 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2328 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2329
2330 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2331
2332 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2333 bitmap.
2334
2335**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2336
2337XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2338`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2339found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2340`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2341
2342Additional image properties supported are:
2343
2344`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2345
2346SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2347name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2348name.
2349
2350XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2351add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2352
a933dad1
DL
2353The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2354to display compressed images.
2355
2356**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2357
2358PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2359mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2360defined.
2361
2362**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2363
2364Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2365package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2366are:
2367
a933dad1
DL
2368**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2369
2370Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2371package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2372properties defined.
2373
2374**** GIF, image type `gif'
2375
2376Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2377`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2378
2379Additional image properties supported are:
2380
2381`:index INDEX'
2382
2383INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2384multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2385
2386This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2387For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2388at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2389every 0.1 seconds.
2390
2391(defun show-anim (file max)
2392 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2393 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2394
2395(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2396 (when (= idx max)
2397 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2398 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2399 (save-excursion
2400 (set-buffer buffer)
2401 (goto-char (point-min))
2402 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2403 (insert-image img "x"))
2404 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2405
2406**** PNG, image type `png'
2407
2408Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2409package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2410properties defined.
2411
2412**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2413
2414Additional image properties supported are:
2415
2416`:pt-width WIDTH'
2417
2418WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2419integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2420
2421`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2422
2423HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2424must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2425
2426`:bounding-box BOX'
2427
2428BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2429the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2430files. This is an required property.
2431
2432Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2433lisp/gs.el.
2434
2435*** Lisp interface.
2436
79214ddf
FP
2437The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2438which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2439
2440Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2441they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2442The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
2443manually.
2444
2445*** Simplified image API, image.el
2446
2447The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2448creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2449can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2450define an image based on available image types. The functions
2451`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2452buffer.
2453
2454+++
2455** Display margins.
2456
2457Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2458and images.
2459
2460To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2461`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2462`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2463obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2464`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2465the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2466of the display margins.
2467
2468You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2469containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2470one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2471string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2472in this file).
2473
2474+++
2475** Help display
2476
2477Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2478moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2479`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2480that have a `help-echo' property.
2481
2482The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2483items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2484If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2485evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2486tool-bar item is used.
2487
2488The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2489help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2490help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2491
2492+++
2493** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2494
2495The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2496This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2497
2498The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2499scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2500The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2501scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2502used.
2503
79214ddf
FP
2504 (global-set-key [A-down]
2505 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2506 (interactive)
79214ddf 2507 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2508 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2509 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2510 #'(lambda ()
2511 (interactive)
79214ddf 2512 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2513 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2514
2515+++
2516** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2517
2518Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2519when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2520variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2521is called with one argument, POS.
2522
2523At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2524characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2525as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2526property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2527`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2528
2529+++
2530** Tool bar support.
2531
2532Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2533parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2534controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2535suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2536`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2537automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2538
2539*** Tool bar item definitions
2540
2541Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2542`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2543where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2544
a933dad1
DL
2545CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2546evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2547the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2548property (see below).
79214ddf 2549
a933dad1
DL
2550BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2551binding are currently ignored.
2552
2553The following properties are recognized:
2554
2555`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2556
a933dad1
DL
2557FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2558or disabled.
79214ddf 2559
a933dad1 2560`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2561
a933dad1 2562FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2563
a933dad1
DL
2564`:filter FUNCTION'
2565
2566FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2567FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2568used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2569
a933dad1
DL
2570`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2571
2572TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2573and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2574
a933dad1
DL
2575`:image IMAGES'
2576
2577IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2578image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2579meaning of each of the four elements:
2580
2581 Index Use when item is
2582 ----------------------------------------
2583 0 enabled and selected
2584 1 enabled and deselected
2585 2 disabled and selected
2586 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2587
a933dad1 2588`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2589
a933dad1
DL
2590Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2591is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2592
2593*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2594
2595If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2596resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2597than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2598
79214ddf 2599If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2600raised when the mouse moves over them.
2601
2602You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2603`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2604pixels. Default is 1.
2605
2606You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2607`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2608
2609*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2610
2611You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2612a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2613
2614 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2615 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2616 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2617
2618is the original tool bar item definition, then
2619
2620 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2621
2622makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2623item.
2624
2625** Mode line changes.
2626
2627+++
2628*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2629
2630The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2631that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2632a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2633
26341. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2635a `local-map' text property.
2636
26372. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2638that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2639
26403. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2641is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2642`local-map' property.
2643
2644The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2645properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2646example.
2647
54522c9f
GM
2648*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2649evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2650
a933dad1
DL
2651+++
2652*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2653variable mode-line-format to nil.
2654
2655+++
2656*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2657
2658This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2659`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2660completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2661`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2662line.
2663
2664The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2665`header-line'.
2666
2667The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2668position in the header-line.
2669
2670+++
2671** Text property `display'
2672
2673The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2674also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2675`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2676below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2677
2678*** Variable width and height spaces
2679
2680To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2681specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2682`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2683area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2684marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2685displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2686simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2687
2688The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2689PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2690properties described below.
2691
2692The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2693characters having the `display' property.
2694
2695- :width WIDTH
2696
2697Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2698character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2699
2700- :relative-width FACTOR
2701
2702Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2703first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2704same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2705width of that character by FACTOR.
2706
2707- :align-to HPOS
2708
2709Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2710value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2711
2712Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2713
2714- :height HEIGHT
2715
2716Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2717normal line height.
2718
2719- :relative-height FACTOR
2720
2721The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2722of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2723
2724- :ascent ASCENT
2725
2726Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2727used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2728baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2729equal to 100.
2730
2731You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2732
2733*** Images
2734
2735A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2736. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2737in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2738their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2739the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2740`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2741area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2742the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2743as display specification.
2744
2745*** Other display properties
2746
2747- :space-width FACTOR
2748
2749Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2750should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2751integer or float.
2752
2753- :height HEIGHT
2754
2755Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2756
2757If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2758means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2759the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2760``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2761a font is available counts as a step.
2762
2763If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2764as tall as the frame's default font.
2765
2766If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2767height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2768
2769Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2770`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2771
2772- :raise FACTOR
2773
2774FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2775font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2776raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2777amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2778`:height' subproperty.
2779
2780*** Conditional display properties
2781
2782All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2783has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2784applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2785During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2786the text having the `display' property.
2787
2788The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2789`(:when t SPEC)'.
2790
2791+++
2792** New menu separator types.
2793
2794Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2795item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2796treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2797to specify other menu separator types.
2798
2799- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2800
2801No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2802separator occurs.
2803
2804- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2805
2806A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2807
2808- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2809
2810A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2811
2812- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2813
2814A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2815
2816- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2817
2818A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2819
2820- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2821
2822A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2823displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2824
2825- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2826
2827A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2828
2829- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2830
2831A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2832
2833- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2834
2835A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2836
2837- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2838
2839Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2840
2841- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2842
2843Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2844
2845- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2846
2847Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2848
2849- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2850
2851Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2852
2853Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2854the corresponding single-line separators.
2855
2856+++
2857** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2858
2859The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2860`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2861Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2862that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2863default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2864default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2865default foreground is black.
2866
2867The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2868(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2869`ScrollBarBackground').
2870
2871Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2872settings for scroll bar colors.
2873
2874+++
2875** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2876display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2877
2878---
2879** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2880starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2881on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2882line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2883the original window start.
2884
2885---
2886** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2887`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2888now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2889
2890+++
2891** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2892
2893A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2894`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2895windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2896other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2897
2898The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2899fixed-width and fixed-height.
2900
2901 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2902
2903A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2904fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2905window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2906change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2907temporarily to nil, for example
2908
2909 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2910 (enlarge-window 10))
2911
79214ddf 2912Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 2913or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
2914
2915** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
2916terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
2917to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
2918overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
2919horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
2920support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
2921^L
2922* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
2923
2924** Not new, but not mentioned before:
2925M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
2926\f
2927* Changes in Emacs 20.4
2928
2929** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
2930
2931You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
2932Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
2933`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
2934
2935If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
2936is the one that is used.
2937
2938** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
2939the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
2940Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
2941separate from the command's regular output.
2942Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
2943says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
2944In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
2945the buffer name.
2946
2947When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
2948output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
2949it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
2950cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
2951
2952** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
2953the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
2954is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
2955created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
2956
2957** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
2958example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
2959match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
2960quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
2961
2962** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
2963now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
2964if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
2965they never ignore case.
2966
2967** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
2968under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
2969applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
2970of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
2971just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
2972convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
2973part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
2974
2975If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
2976the same format that was used in the file before.
2977
2978You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
2979`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
2980
2981** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
2982renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
2983This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
2984
2985** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
2986The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
2987buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
2988your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
2989is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
2990end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
2991Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
2992
2993The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
2994eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
2995control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
2996format. You can now customize these variables.
2997
2998** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
2999filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3000filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3001enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3002
3003** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3004in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3005windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3006
3007** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3008dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3009doesn't have any effect.
3010
3011** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3012not one per buffer.
3013
3014** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3015use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3016 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3017
3018** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3019To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3020`auto-show-mode' command.
3021
3022** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3023avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3024versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3025choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3026occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3027
3028** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3029cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3030
3031** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3032character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3033feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3034
3035** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3036the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3037interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3038and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3039
3040** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3041
3042The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3043that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3044one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3045codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3046set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3047
3048Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3049from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3050
3051IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3052equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3053a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3054`?' on other systems.
3055
3056IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3057feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3058Unix.
3059
3060Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3061current codepage when it starts.
3062
3063** Mail changes
3064
feab4fba
GM
3065*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3066`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3067appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3068non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3069MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3070headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3071latin-1:
3072
3073 MIME-version: 1.0
3074 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3075 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3076
a933dad1
DL
3077*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3078default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3079default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3080sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3081buffer-file-coding-system.
3082
3083You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3084sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3085mail.
3086
3087*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3088if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3089Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3090list of possible coding systems.
3091
3092** CC Mode changes
3093
3094*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3095modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3096longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3097docstring for details.
3098
3099*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3100symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3101found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3102prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3103lineup functions use this feature currently.
3104
3105*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3106"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3107
3108*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3109"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3110
3111*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3112from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3113symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3114c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3115anonymous classes.
3116
3117*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3118syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3119
3120*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3121inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3122support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3123function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3124
3125*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3126(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3127brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3128c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3129(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3130
3131*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3132
3133*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3134
3135*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3136for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3137
3138*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3139
3140*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3141associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3142This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3143circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3144class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3145
3146** Gnus changes.
3147
3148*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3149added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3150Gnus manual for the full story.
3151
3152*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3153before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3154group, which is created automatically.
3155
3156*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3157values.
3158
3159*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3160
3161*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3162outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3163
3164*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3165`C-u C-c C-c'.
3166
3167*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3168
3169*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3170re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3171
3172*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3173
3174*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3175Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3176
3177*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3178`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3179
3180*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3181control over simplification.
3182
3183*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3184
3185*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3186limit.
3187
3188*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3189
3190*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3191
79214ddf 3192*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3193If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3194rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3195
3196*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3197`a' forces normal posting method.
3198
3199*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3200-- `W d'.
3201
3202*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3203to a non-nil value.
3204
3205*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3206where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3207
3208*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3209has been added.
3210
3211*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3212
3213*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3214
3215*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3216`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3217
3218*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3219`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3220
3221*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3222
3223*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3224been added.
3225
3226*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3227`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3228
3229*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3230updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3231
3232*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3233
3234*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3235
3236*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3237
3238** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3239
3240*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3241options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3242nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3243
3244*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3245TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3246of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3247TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3248can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3249
3250*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3251All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3252but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3253the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3254
3255*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3256the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3257buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3258mismatch.
3259
3260** Changes to RefTeX mode
3261
3262*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3263file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3264
3265*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3266lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3267characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3268removed from the label.
3269
3270*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3271a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3272
3273*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3274customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3275
3276*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3277`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3278expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3279
3280*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3281
3282** New/deleted modes and packages
3283
3284*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3285SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3286
3287*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3288editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3289SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3290
3291*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3292changes with a special face.
3293
3294*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3295this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3296Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3297\f
3298* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3299
3300** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3301This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3302conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3303and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3304check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3305
3306The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3307Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3308distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3309
3310** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3311MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3312controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3313directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3314Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3315on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3316string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3317program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3318printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3319
3320** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3321output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3322available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3323input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3324temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3325program.
3326
3327An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3328and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3329programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3330automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3331as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3332ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3333
3334** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3335a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3336MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3337was not documented clearly before.
3338
3339** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3340This includes Tetris and Snake.
3341\f
3342* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3343
3344** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3345return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3346They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3347meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3348
3349** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3350WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3351and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3352
3353** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3354
3355*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3356It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3357
3358*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3359the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3360integers.
3361
3362** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3363files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3364arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3365file names and attributes are returned.
3366
3367** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3368sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3369accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3370It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3371returns the result.
3372
3373** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3374to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3375
3376** New functions for base64 conversion:
3377
3378The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3379into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3380performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3381optionally.
3382
3383Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3384job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3385
3386**
3387The new function process-running-child-p
3388will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3389terminal to its own child process.
3390
3391** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3392when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3393to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3394itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3395
3396** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3397be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3398
3399** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3400:included is an alias for :visible.
3401
3402easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3403easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3404to move or copy menu entries.
3405
3406** Multibyte editing changes
3407
3408*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3409an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3410make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3411work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3412char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3413 (setq char (sref str idx)
3414 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3415The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3416
3417If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3418(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3419 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3420
3421*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3422region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3423deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3424
3425 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3426
3427This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3428across the boundary.
3429
3430*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3431`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3432 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3433 contains 8-bit characters.
3434 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3435 contains invalid characters.
3436
3437*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3438text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3439preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3440text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3441way.
3442
3443*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3444If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3445end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3446prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3447
3448*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3449compose Thai characters in a string.
3450
3451** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3452argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3453for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3454menus should always use the third argument.
3455
3456** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3457read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3458arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3459input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3460
3461** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3462of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3463programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3464inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3465
3466** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3467the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3468returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3469echo area contents.
3470
3471 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3472
3473** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3474NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3475requested feature cannot be loaded.
3476
3477** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3478foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3479means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3480
3481** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3482gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3483
3484** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3485read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3486unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3487end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3488
3489** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3490the gap of the current buffer.
3491
3492** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3493to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3494current buffer.
3495
3496** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3497facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3498These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3499it back in after any modifications have been made.
3500\f
3501* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3502
3503** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3504the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3505/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3506directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3507subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3508
3509Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3510names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3511Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3512which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3513these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3514
3515Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3516starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3517time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3518
3519This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3520Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3521to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3522subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3523`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3524results.
3525
3526** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3527GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3528that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3529fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3530\f
3531* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3532
3533** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3534including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3535it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3536perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3537
3538** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3539specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3540region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3541further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3542command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3543within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3544are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3545region.
3546
3547In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3548selective undo.
3549
3550** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3551unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3552buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3553effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3554Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3555
3556The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3557though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3558-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3559load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3560
3561** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3562no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3563enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3564something that most users not do.
3565
3566** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3567operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3568The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3569applications.
3570
3571C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3572pasting operations.
3573
3574** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3575setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3576like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3577printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3578`ps-printer-name'.
3579
3580** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3581minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3582any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3583except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3584incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3585hits a new word.
3586
3587Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3588Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3589to be confused by TeX commands.
3590
3591You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3592correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3593clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3594of various alternative replacements and actions.
3595
3596Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3597the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3598corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3599alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3600flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3601
3602Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3603flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3604
3605** Changes in input method usage.
3606
3607Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3608the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3609respectively.
3610
3611You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3612
3613If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3614of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3615
3616The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3617that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3618
3619 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3620
3621 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3622
3623 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3624 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3625
3626 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3627 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3628 o When you are using a complex input method.
3629 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3630
3631If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3632input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3633and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3634setting it to t is helpful.
3635
3636The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3637
3638In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3639keys:
3640 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3641 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3642 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3643These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3644environment.
3645
3646** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3647names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3648minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3649get
3650
3651 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3652
3653which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3654
3655Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3656Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3657
3658** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3659at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3660its owner and group.
3661
3662** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3663Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3664
3665** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3666contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3667
3668** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3669which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3670in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3671by the left edge of the rectangle.
3672
3673** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3674increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3675C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3676for writing keyboard macros.
3677
3678** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3679files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3680frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3681the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3682additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3683info.
3684
3685** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3686
3687** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3688query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3689contents only.
3690
3691** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3692confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3693the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3694says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3695
3696** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3697non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3698literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3699
3700** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3701now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3702Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3703inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3704
3705** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3706failure if the command produces no output.
3707
3708** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3709manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3710the mouse.
3711
3712** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3713mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3714function and variable names.
3715
3716** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3717reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3718file-coding-system-alist.
3719
3720** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3721t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3722converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3723the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3724according to the current fontset.
3725
3726** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3727
3728The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3729that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3730nonascii-insert-offset.
3731
3732For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3733enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3734nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3735characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3736
3737** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3738an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3739
3740** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3741letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3742
3743** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3744are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3745command keys.
3746
3747** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3748user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3749
3750Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3751user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3752all variables that have documentation.
3753
3754** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3755shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3756that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3757minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3758it should show; the default is 20.
3759
3760Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3761the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3762of your input.
3763
3764** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3765all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3766recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3767argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3768the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3769Newly added options are included as well.
3770
3771If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3772then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3773for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3774
3775This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3776Customize menu.
3777
3778** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3779the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3780
3781** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3782buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3783invoked.
3784
3785** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3786that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3787The default is 1.
3788
3789** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3790syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3791new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3792(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3793sensibly.
3794
3795** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3796
3797** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3798value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3799two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3800
3801** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3802reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3803for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3804every night.
3805
3806** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
3807the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3808
3809** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3810read and post multi-lingual articles.
3811
3812** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3813doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3814be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3815outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3816the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3817made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3818
3819** Mail reading and sending changes
3820
3821*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3822the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3823changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3824toggle.
3825
3826*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3827now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3828summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3829the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3830rmail-default-body-file.
3831
3832*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3833longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3834handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3835
3836*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3837it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3838is evaluated to insert the signature.
3839
3840*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3841outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3842handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3843putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3844transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3845especially interested in trying feedmail.
3846
3847feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3848feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3849provided by feedmail are:
3850
3851**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3852stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3853there is also a queue for draft messages
3854
3855**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3856be prompted for confirmation
3857
3858**** does smart filling of address headers
3859
3860**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3861the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3862can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3863
3864**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3865the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3866/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3867function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3868
3869** Dired changes
3870
3871*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3872files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3873
3874*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3875run Dired on the directory name at point.
3876
3877*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3878files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3879for a specified regexp.
3880
3881** VC Changes
3882
3883*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3884conveniently.
3885
3886*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3887faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3888Dired.
3889
3890VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3891directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3892listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3893currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3894
3895You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3896then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3897vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3898control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3899on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3900
3901All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3902is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3903`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3904the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3905`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
3906
3907The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
3908toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 3909VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
3910`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
3911
3912Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
3913ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
3914command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
3915
3916*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
3917file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
3918session to resolve them.
3919
3920Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
3921resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
3922contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
3923uses as well).
3924
3925*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
3926command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
3927you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
3928either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
3929branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
3930If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
3931using ediff.
3932
3933** Changes in Font Lock
3934
3935*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
3936are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
3937use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
3938unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
3939compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
3940
3941** Frame name display changes
3942
3943*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
3944frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
3945raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
3946when many frames are invisible or iconified.
3947
3948*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
3949frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
3950menu.
3951
3952** Comint (subshell) changes
3953
3954*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
3955subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
3956with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
3957
3958*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
3959
3960C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
3961that is, the line after the last line you got.
3962You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
3963
3964C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
3965send the current line together with the following line, when you send
3966the following line.
3967
3968C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
3969which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
3970previously sent input.
3971
3972C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
3973it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
3974as the search string.
3975
3976*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
3977automatically in compilation-mode windows.
3978
3979** C mode changes
3980
3981*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
3982and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
3983assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 3984definition.
a933dad1
DL
3985
3986*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
3987(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
3988Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
3989style is still the default however.
3990
3991*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
3992
3993*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
3994are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
3995them. They do not have key bindings by default.
3996
3997*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
3998and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
3999
4000*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4001namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4002
4003*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4004makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4005
4006*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4007c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4008
4009*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4010should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4011package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4012variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4013
4014** Changes to hippie-expand.
4015
79214ddf 4016*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4017non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4018which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4019
4020*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4021non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4022expanding dynamically.
4023
4024*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4025non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4026
4027*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4028non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4029this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4030expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4031
4032*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4033
4034** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4035
4036*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4037bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4038automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4039bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4040against the first word in the title.
4041
4042*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4043capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4044bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4045lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4046lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4047bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4048
4049*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4050generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4051replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4052bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4053
4054** Changes in vcursor.el.
4055
4056*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4057and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4058variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4059entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4060`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4061in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4062
4063*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4064Editing group once the package is loaded.
4065
4066*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4067generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4068vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4069
4070*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4071vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4072
4073** Ispell changes.
4074
79214ddf
FP
4075*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4076buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4077are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4078
4079*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4080A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4081and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4082defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4083include:
a933dad1
DL
4084
4085 o URLs are automatically skipped
4086 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4087
4088*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4089
4090** Changes to RefTeX mode
4091
4092RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4093large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4094re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4095section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4096
4097*** New recursive parser.
4098
4099The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4100entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4101recursive parser scans the individual files.
4102
4103*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4104
a933dad1
DL
4105Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4106partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4107the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4108
4109 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4110
4111*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4112
4113This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4114
4115 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4116
4117*** Using multiple selection buffers
4118
4119If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4120for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4121
4122 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4123
4124*** References to external documents.
4125
4126The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4127documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4128documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4129macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4130RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4131the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4132The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4133
4134*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4135
4136The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4137and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4138
4139Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4140the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4141
4142*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4143
4144The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4145buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4146
4147*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4148
4149The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4150contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4151`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4152have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4153enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4154at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4155more.
4156
4157*** Support for the varioref package
4158
4159The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4160
4161*** New hooks
4162
4163Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4164and citations are created. These hooks are
4165`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4166`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4167
4168*** Citations outside LaTeX
4169
4170The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4171a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4172
4173*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4174
4175The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4176fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4177fontified, use
4178
4179 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4180
4181** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4182With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4183the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4184directories that contain the same file name.
4185
4186Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4187Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4188file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4189Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4190have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4191names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4192directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4193directory.
4194
4195** New modes and packages
4196
4197*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4198It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4199it, but some do not.
4200
4201*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4202code.
4203
4204*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4205current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4206around in a buffer.
4207
4208Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4209
4210*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4211uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4212be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4213established system of notation similar to Chess.
4214
4215*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4216documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4217guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4218
4219*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4220available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4221system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4222simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4223functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4224the like.
4225
4226*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4227identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4228
4229*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4230within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4231used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4232the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4233
4234*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4235
4236 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4237 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4238 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4239 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4240 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4241 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4242 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4243 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4244 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4245 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4246 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4247
4248 Platform-specific modes:
4249
4250 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4251 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4252 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4253 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4254 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4255 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4256 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4257 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4258 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4259\f
4260* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4261
4262** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4263use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4264That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4265Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4266
4267Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4268you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4269consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4270
4271** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4272and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4273specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4274searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4275
4276** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4277multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4278character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4279environment.
4280
4281** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4282take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4283string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4284current input method for reading this one event.
4285
4286** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4287now control whether to output certain characters as
4288backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4289non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4290characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4291in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4292\f
4293* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4294
4295** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4296of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4297
4298** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4299in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4300always increases point by 1.
4301
4302The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4303considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4304
4305See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4306
4307** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4308Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4309default value changed. For example,
4310
4311 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4312 :type 'integer
4313 :group 'foo
4314 :version "20.3")
4315
79214ddf 4316 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4317 :version "20.3")
4318
4319If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4320default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4321is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4322`:version' in the top level group.
4323
4324This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4325
4326** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4327starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4328
4329However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4330symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4331support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4332to themselves.
4333
4334If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4335this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4336values whatever.
4337
4338** There is a new debugger command, R.
4339It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4340in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4341
4342** Frame-local variables.
4343
4344You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4345the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4346local bindings for that variable.
4347
4348These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4349frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4350modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4351parameter name.
4352
4353Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4354Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4355active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4356that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4357
4358It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4359clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4360very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4361through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4362
4363** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4364"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4365evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4366makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4367See the documentation in sregex.el.
4368
4369** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4370is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4371parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4372The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4373
4374** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4375If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4376
4377** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4378known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4379define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4380
4381** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4382when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4383it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4384history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4385
4386The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4387return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4388empty input.
4389
4390** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4391for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4392`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4393Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4394`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4395
4396** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4397echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4398a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4399default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4400
4401** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4402specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4403function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4404place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4405non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4406
4407** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4408If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4409up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4410end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4411
4412** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4413which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4414If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4415
4416** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4417holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4418was directed to display this buffer.
4419
4420** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4421with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4422describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4423other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4424set-window-configuration.
4425
4426** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4427window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4428positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4429windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4430
4431** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4432override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4433look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4434
4435If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4436non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4437map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4438
4439minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4440and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4441
4442** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4443except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4444
4445** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4446USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4447floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4448
4449** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4450to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4451in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4452it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4453
4454** Menu changes
4455
4456*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4457keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4458better supported.
4459
4460The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4461a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4462you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4463can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4464then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4465
4466*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4467
4468In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4469 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4470defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4471starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4472
4473The format is:
4474 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4475 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4476where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4477string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4478The supported properties include
4479
4480:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4481 item is enabled.
4482:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4483 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4484:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4485 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4486 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4487 It should return a binding to use instead.
4488:keys DESCRIPTION
4489 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4490 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4491 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4492:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4493 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4494 keyboard binding.
4495:key-sequence nil
4496 This means that the command normally has no
4497 keyboard equivalent.
4498:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4499:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4500 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4501 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4502 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4503
4504Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4505Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4506
4507(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4508
4509** New event types
4510
4511*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4512mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4513corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4514which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4515
4516 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4517
4518where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4519same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4520indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4521negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4522the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4523forward, away from the user.
4524
4525As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4526
4527*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4528files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4529and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4530filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4531loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4532
4533 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4534
4535where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4536same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4537that were dragged and dropped.
4538
4539As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4540
4541** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4542
4543*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4544any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4545to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4546
4547*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4548can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4549that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4550
4551*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4552in Emacs 19 and before.
4553
4554The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4555The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4556
4557*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4558buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4559unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4560representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4561
4562This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4563as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4564viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4565one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4566will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4567
4568This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4569representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4570(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4571consistent with the new representation.
4572
4573*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4574representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4575about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4576however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4577
4578The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4579nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4580using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4581
4582*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4583representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4584representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4585
4586The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4587loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4588is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4589
4590*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4591which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4592
4593*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4594which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4595
4596*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4597portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4598so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4599You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4600
4601*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4602it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4603
4604*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4605convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4606buffer or string being searched.
4607
4608One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4609[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4610searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4611searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4612obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4613you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4614expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4615
4616*** Structure of coding system changed.
4617
4618All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4619by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4620which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4621as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4622vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4623your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4624define-coding-system-alias.
4625
4626The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4627the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4628access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4629pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4630character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4631safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4632'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4633`iso-8859-1'.
4634
4635Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4636The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4637coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4638(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4639
4640Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4641also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4642are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4643the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4644
4645*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4646proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4647This function requires a user interaction.
4648
4649*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4650find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4651select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4652systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4653a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4654select-safe-coding-system.
4655
4656*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4657decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4658last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4659was done.
4660
4661*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4662used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4663coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4664
4665*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4666return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4667characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4668`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4669
4670*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4671coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4672coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4673converted.
4674
4675*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4676coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4677
4678*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4679character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4680character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4681each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4682either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4683range of characters.
4684
4685*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4686Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4687
4688*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4689in the current buffer at position POS.
4690
4691*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4692input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4693function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4694character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4695event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4696binding input-method-function to nil.
4697
4698The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4699method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4700input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4701the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4702not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4703
4704The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4705subsequent events of a key sequence.
4706
4707*** You can customize any language environment by using
4708set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4709
4710The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4711customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4712instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4713environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4714exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4715\f
4716* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4717
4718** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4719options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4720at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4721tree structure.
4722
4723M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4724user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4725
4726With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4727session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4728in your .emacs file.)
4729
4730** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4731You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4732
4733** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4734This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4735
4736** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4737immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4738kills the region.
4739
4740The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4741delete the character before point, as usual.
4742
4743** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4744on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4745by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4746
4747** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4748insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4749the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4750onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4751history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4752past.)
4753
4754** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4755This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4756in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4757TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4758makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4759
4760As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4761and is an alias for it.
4762
4763If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4764use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4765
4766** Scrolling changes
4767
4768*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4769position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4770
4771In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4772on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4773where it started.
4774
4775*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4776move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4777screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4778does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4779
4780*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4781top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4782comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4783recenters the window.
4784
4785** International character set support (MULE)
4786
4787Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4788including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4789Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4790Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4791features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4792MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4793
4794Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4795coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4796character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4797variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4798into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4799
4800Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4801generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4802supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4803language, to make it possible to type them.
4804
4805The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4806character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4807
4808The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4809to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4810
4811You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4812
4813 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4814
4815Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4816characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4817argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4818already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4819characters for their work until they want to change.
4820
4821*** Input methods
4822
4823An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4824specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4825has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4826the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4827support several input methods.
4828
4829The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4830another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4831work.
4832
4833A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4834characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4835composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4836consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4837sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4838letter.
4839
4840The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4841by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4842First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4843marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4844mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4845
4846None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4847they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4848phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4849converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4850
4851Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4852word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4853typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4854the first guess is wrong.
4855
4856*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4857turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4858
4859If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4860byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4861they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4862the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4863
4864However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4865use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4866includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4867translate automatically to and from either one.
4868
4869*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4870
4871Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4872file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4873sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4874what you want.
4875
4876If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4877example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4878system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4879multibyte characters in that buffer.
4880
4881If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4882character conversion as well.
4883
4884*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4885
4886A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4887Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4888requires using many fonts.
4889
4890Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4891collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4892
4893A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4894the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4895have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4896you would use a font.
4897
4898If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4899specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4900display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4901
4902The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4903(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4904characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4905or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
4906and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
4907
4908*** Defining fontsets.
4909
4910Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
4911chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
4912with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
4913
4914Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
4915of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
4916`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
4917standard fontset are created automatically.
4918
4919If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
4920argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
4921FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
4922with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
4923name is `fontset-startup'.
4924
4925Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
4926The resource value should have this form:
4927 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
4928FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
4929 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
4930 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
4931 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
4932The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
4933of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
4934CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
4935FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
4936
4937Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
4938last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
4939You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
4940
4941For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
4942font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
4943following resource,
4944 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
4945the font for ASCII is generated as below:
4946 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
4947Here is the substitution rule:
4948 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
4949 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
4950 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
4951 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
4952 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
4953
4954The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
4955fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
4956that function explicitly to create a fontset.
4957
4958With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
4959like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
4960name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
4961fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
4962fontsets.
4963
4964*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
4965defaults for a particular choice of language.
4966
4967Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
4968method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
4969visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
4970already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
4971language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
4972system for new files that you create.
4973
4974It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
4975set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
4976whole Emacs session.
4977
4978For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
4979chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
4980with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
4981
4982*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
4983specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
4984specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
4985the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
4986coding systems that Emacs supports.
4987
4988*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
4989lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
4990This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
4991After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
4992is used for *the immediately following command*.
4993
4994So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
4995write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
4996
4997If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
4998then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
4999
5000For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5001visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5002
5003*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5004construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5005to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5006specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5007of the file.
5008
5009*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5010the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5011code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5012translated into that character code.
5013
5014This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5015various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5016
5017By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5018
5019*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5020the coding system for keyboard input.
5021
5022Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5023with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5024some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5025
5026By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5027
5028Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5029input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5030translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5031to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5032designed to work with terminals.
5033
5034*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5035specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5036This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5037has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5038translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5039in the corresponding buffer.
5040
5041By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5042
5043*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5044to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5045It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5046
5047*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5048an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5049command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5050want to use.
5051
5052C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5053method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5054
5055*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5056layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5057remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5058which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5059
5060*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5061the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5062related information.
5063
5064*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5065HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5066scripts.
5067
5068*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5069information about the support for a particular language.
5070You specify the language as an argument.
5071
5072*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5073the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5074first dash.
5075
5076A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5077(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5078whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
50791 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5080
5081 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5082 B big5 (Chinese)
5083 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5084 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5085 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5086 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5087 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5088 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5089 K euc-korea (Korean)
5090 R koi8 (Russian)
5091 Q tibetan
5092 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5093 T lao
5094 T tis620 (Thai)
5095 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5096 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5097 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5098 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5099 z hz (Chinese)
5100
5101When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5102two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5103coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5104keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5105
5106*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5107conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5108
5109When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5110into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5111rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5112Rmail files themselves.
5113
5114*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5115conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5116
5117Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5118for sending mail:
5119
5120- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5121- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5122- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5123 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5124- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5125
5126*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5127to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5128Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5129translations.
5130
5131** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5132of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5133insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5134without any conversion.
5135
5136** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5137You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5138RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5139any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5140
5141** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5142functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5143
5144Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5145Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5146
5147Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5148mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5149
5150** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5151complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5152in the buffer before point.
5153
5154With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5155symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5156you are using.
5157
5158With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5159just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5160
5161** File locking works with NFS now.
5162
5163The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5164in the same directory as FILENAME.
5165
5166This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5167works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5168can become a bottleneck.
5169
5170The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5171does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5172create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5173file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5174rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5175so useful that the change is worth while.
5176
5177When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5178are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5179collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5180tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5181
5182** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5183it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5184show-paren-mode.
5185
5186** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5187selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5188delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5189
5190** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5191within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5192complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5193
5194** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5195it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5196set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5197
5198** Changes in View mode.
5199
5200*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5201Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5202
5203*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5204view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5205
5206*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5207previous state.
5208
5209*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5210scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5211
5212*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5213non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5214not just the selected window.
5215
5216*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5217read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5218turns View mode on or off.
5219
5220*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5221how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5222delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5223
5224** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5225now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5226
5227** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5228has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5229presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5230which version to compare with.
5231
5232** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5233blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5234
5235The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5236is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5237isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5238shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5239
5240By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5241of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5242blocks, all of them or none.
5243
5244** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5245current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5246confirmation first.
5247
5248** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5249now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5250However, the mode will not be changed if
5251(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5252(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5253 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5254(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5255
5256This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5257
5258However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5259these commands do not change the major mode.
5260
5261** M-x occur changes.
5262
5263*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5264it performs a case-sensitive search.
5265
5266*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5267if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5268using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5269
5270** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5271in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5272window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5273that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5274buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5275
5276** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5277after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5278appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5279come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5280
5281** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5282selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5283buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5284
5285** Outline mode changes.
5286
5287*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5288
5289*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5290
5291** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5292you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5293Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5294was already active.
5295
5296The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5297unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5298get confused by it.
5299
5300If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5301set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5302
5303** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5304
5305*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5306conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5307character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5308including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5309
5310The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5311mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5312copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5313
5314*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5315are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5316values.
5317
5318`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5319case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5320`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5321case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5322
5323** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5324certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5325can be. The default value is 30.
5326
5327** Changes in Mail mode.
5328
5329*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5330Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5331composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5332`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5333`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5334behavior.
5335
5336C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5337compose-mail-other-frame.
5338
5339*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5340the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5341replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5342buffer that shows the original message.
5343
5344*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5345with separator lines around the contents.
5346
5347*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5348in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5349definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5350need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5351
5352*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5353
5354**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5355for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5356controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5357Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5358
5359**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5360to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5361/etc/passwd.
5362
5363**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5364to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5365/etc/passwd.
5366
5367** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5368special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5369directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5370reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5371
5372Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5373when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5374be taken to be magic.
5375
5376** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5377files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5378available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5379
5380M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5381(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5382
5383** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5384suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5385
5386In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5387
5388new key dired.el binding old key
5389------- ---------------- -------
5390 * c dired-change-marks c
5391 * m dired-mark m
5392 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5393 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5394 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5395 * u dired-unmark u
5396 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5397 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5398 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5399 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5400 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5401 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5402
5403** Rmail changes.
5404
5405*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5406saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5407chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5408each time you run it.
5409
5410*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5411whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5412
5413*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5414messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5415means to move in the opposite direction.
5416
5417*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5418you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5419
5420*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5421just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5422It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5423can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5424for output.
5425
5426** Gnus changes.
5427
5428*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5429
79214ddf
FP
5430*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5431Gnus.
a933dad1 5432
79214ddf 5433*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5434`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5435
5436*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5437article mode line.
5438
5439*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5440
5441*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5442
5443(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5444
5445*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5446are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5447`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5448
5449*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5450
5451*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5452
5453*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5454See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5455
5456*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5457Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5458used to pick articles.
5459
5460*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5461another have been added.
5462
5463 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5464
5465*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5466generating lines in buffers.
5467
5468*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5469`M-C-_'.
5470
5471*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5472
5473*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5474
5475 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5476
5477*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5478
a933dad1
DL
5479 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5480
5481*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5482Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5483
5484*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5485the native server.
5486
5487 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5488
5489*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5490(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5491
5492*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5493
5494*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5495even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5496
5497*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5498(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5499
5500 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5501 a group.
5502
5503*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5504sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5505
5506 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5507
5508*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5509
5510 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5511
5512*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5513
a933dad1
DL
5514 Use the `Y c' command.
5515
5516*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5517
5518*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5519
5520 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5521
5522*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5523from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5524
a933dad1
DL
5525 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5526
5527*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5528
5529*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5530the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5531
5532 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5533
5534Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5535and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5536from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5537hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5538this issue.)
5539
5540Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5541automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5542particular news group. This can be done by:
5543
5544 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5545
5546Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5547of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5548"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5549system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5550for reading and posting).
5551
5552CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5553 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5554Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5555newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5556there.
5557
5558Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5559default. Here are some of these default settings:
5560
5561 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5562 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5563 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5564 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5565 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5566
5567When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5568the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5569
5570** CC mode changes.
5571
5572*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5573code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5574values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5575this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5576Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5577loaded.
5578
5579If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5580Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5581style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5582share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5583c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5584must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5585
5586*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5587of the current buffer.
5588
5589*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5590it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5591of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5592
5593*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5594style that the Python developers like.
5595
5596*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5597This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5598just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5599
5600** VC Changes [new]
5601
5602** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5603name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5604directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5605
5606This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5607master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5608developers.
5609
5610You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5611RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5612
5613*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5614other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5615writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5616calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5617
5618*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5619version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5620
5621** Calendar changes.
5622
5623A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5624of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5625for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5626
5627** ps-print changes
5628
79214ddf 5629There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5630
5631*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5632
5633The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5634formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5635`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5636`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5637It defaults to `letter'.
5638If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5639
5640The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5641of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5642non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5643
5644The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5645It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5646It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5647
5648*** Horizontal layout
5649
5650The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5651`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5652All are measured in points.
5653
5654*** Vertical layout
5655
5656The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5657`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5658All are measured in points.
5659
5660*** Headers
5661
5662If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5663`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5664margin above the text.
5665
79214ddf 5666If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5667framing box is printed around the header.
5668
5669The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5670`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5671
79214ddf
FP
5672The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5673`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5674`ps-header-font-size'.
5675
5676*** Font managing
5677
5678The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5679used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5680`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5681elements to this alist.
5682
79214ddf 5683The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5684for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5685
5686** hideshow changes.
5687
5688*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5689C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5690
5691*** Support for java-mode added.
5692
5693*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5694in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5695
5696*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5697the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5698way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5699
5700*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5701robust and a lot faster.
5702
79214ddf 5703*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5704
5705*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5706to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5707documentation for more details.
5708
5709** Changes in Enriched mode.
5710
5711*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5712filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5713of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5714use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5715the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5716
5717*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5718distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5719as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5720as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5721
5722** Font Lock mode
5723
5724*** Custom support
5725
5726The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5727font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5728faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5729group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5730your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5731consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5732
5733You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5734
5735*** Maximum decoration
5736
5737Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5738default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5739of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5740supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5741to get the old behavior.
5742
5743*** New support
5744
5745Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5746
5747Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5748support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5749
5750*** Configurable support
5751
5752Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5753additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5754c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5755java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5756list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5757of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5758convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5759
5760Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5761way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5762it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5763
5764*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5765
5766You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5767highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5768for any mode.
5769
5770For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5771
5772 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5773
5774in your ~/.emacs.
5775
5776*** New faces
5777
5778Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5779font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5780distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5781to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5782
5783*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5784
5785The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5786cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5787same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5788
5789*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5790
5791The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5792according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5793the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5794non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5795refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5796the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5797Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5798
5799This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5800For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5801this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5802refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5803containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5804the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5805
5806As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5807
5808Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5809Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5810Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5811new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5812
5813If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5814settings.
5815
5816** Ada mode changes.
5817
5818*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5819If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5820procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5821you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5822stubs.
5823
5824*** There are two new commands:
5825 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5826 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5827
5828The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5829`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5830`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5831
5832*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5833is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5834Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5835
5836*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5837formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5838places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5839space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5840
5841** Scheme mode changes.
5842
5843*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5844mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5845for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5846with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5847have any effect.
5848
5849If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5850still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5851scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5852variables as buffer-local variables.
5853
5854*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5855Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5856
133c9e59
GM
5857** Changes to the emacsclient program
5858
875c1439
GM
5859*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5860USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5861associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5862can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5863
133c9e59 5864*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5865it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5866buffer in Emacs.
5867
133c9e59
GM
5868*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5869use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5870ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5871option takes precedence.
5872
a933dad1
DL
5873** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5874constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5875(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5876
5877** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5878which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5879the current defun.
5880
5881** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5882following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5883
5884** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5885and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5886necessary).
5887
5888** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5889if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5890these register values no longer become completely useless.
5891If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5892asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5893it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5894
5895** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5896example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5897be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5898you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5899
5900You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5901variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5902file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5903revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5904only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5905
5906** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
5907since it applies only to the current frame.
5908
5909** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
5910file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
5911and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
5912
5913This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
5914multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
5915variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
5916tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
5917instead of just the file you are editing.
5918
5919** RefTeX mode
5920
5921RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
5922and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
5923different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
5924multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
5925turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
5926
79214ddf 5927C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
5928 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
5929 knows which kind of label is needed.
5930
5931C-c ) reftex-reference
5932 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
5933 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
5934
5935C-c [ reftex-citation
5936 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
5937 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
5938
5939C-c & reftex-view-crossref
5940 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
5941
5942C-c = reftex-toc
5943 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
5944 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 5945
a933dad1
DL
5946Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
5947commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
5948Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
5949reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
5950C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
5951
5952** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5953
5954*** Info documentation is now available.
5955
5956*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
5957both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
5958
5959*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
5960bibtex-user-optional-fields.
5961
5962*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
5963(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
5964
5965*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
5966entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
5967appropriate functions.
5968
5969*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
5970entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
5971
5972*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
5973been cleaned.
5974
5975*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
5976bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
5977
5978*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
5979shall be delimited.
5980
5981*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
5982bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
5983bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
5984
5985*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
5986field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
5987prefixed with `ALT'.
5988
5989*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
5990bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
5991formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
5992documentation).
5993
5994*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
5995documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
5996for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
5997
5998*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
5999comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6000
6001*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6002alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6003signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6004
6005*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6006
6007*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6008
6009*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6010from alien sources.
6011
6012*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6013to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6014crossref entries.
6015
6016*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6017region.
6018
6019*** Added support for imenu.
6020
6021*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6022of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6023`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6024`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6025
6026*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6027from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6028
6029** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6030
30a009a5 6031** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6032
a933dad1
DL
6033** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6034functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6035Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6036as an argument.
6037
6038When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6039and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6040
6041** browse-url changes
6042
6043*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6044Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6045(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6046non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6047customization variables.
6048
6049*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6050
6051*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6052lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6053(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6054
6055** Changes in Ediff
6056
6057*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6058pops up the Info file for this command.
6059
6060*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6061the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6062merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6063directories).
6064
6065*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6066and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6067files in the same directory.
6068
6069*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6070The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6071related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6072
6073** Changes in Viper
6074
6075*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6076*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6077 instead of vip-.
6078*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6079*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6080Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6081*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6082*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6083*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6084color when Viper is in insert state.
6085*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6086Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6087viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6088
6089** Etags changes.
6090
6091*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6092default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6093Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6094variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6095not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6096
6097*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6098
6099*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6100constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6101
6102*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6103recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6104In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6105
6106*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6107C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6108recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6109methods and protocols.
6110
6111*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6112.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6113column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6114paragraph name.
6115
6116*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6117an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6118at least M times and as many as N times.
6119
6120** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6121in files has changed slightly.
6122
6123With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6124time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6125This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6126with old time-stamp-format values.
6127
6128In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6129(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6130This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6131reasons.
6132
6133In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6134natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6135fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6136(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6137time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6138specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6139
6140Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6141case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6142truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6143
6144The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6145being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6146future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6147recommended now will continue to work then.
6148
6149See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6150details.
6151
6152** There are some additional major modes:
6153
6154dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6155m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6156meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6157
6158** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6159copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6160into Emacs.
6161
6162** New Lisp packages include:
6163
6164*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6165
6166*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6167be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6168
6169*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6170
6171*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6172in shell buffers.
6173
6174*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6175See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6176and `elint-defun'.
6177
6178*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6179meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6180ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6181strings or comments.
6182
6183These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6184abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6185you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6186insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6187at these points.
6188
6189*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6190can visit them by short forms of their names.
6191
6192*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6193Emacs Lisp function at point.
6194
6195*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6196
6197*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6198switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6199
6200*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6201
6202*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6203
6204*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6205
6206*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6207from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6208
6209*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6210You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6211inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6212original place after inserting the copy.
6213
6214*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6215on the buffer.
6216
6217You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6218velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6219(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6220
6221Enable mouse-drag with:
6222 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6223-or-
6224 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6225
6226*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6227mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6228
6229*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6230It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6231
6232*** ogonek
6233
6234The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6235Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6236platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6237TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6238ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6239prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6240instance) and vice versa.
6241
6242To use this package load it using
6243 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6244Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6245 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6246 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6247The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6248ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6249
6250*** Interface to ph.
6251
6252Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6253
6254The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6255services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6256these servers.
6257
6258*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6259
6260*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6261You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6262while the real cursor does not move.
6263
6264*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6265for visiting your favorite web sites.
6266
6267*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6268so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6269
6270** movemail change
6271
6272Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6273mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6274supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6275user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6276
6277This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6278\f
6279* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6280
6281** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6282
6283Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6284end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6285Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6286file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6287file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6288
6289To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6290C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6291coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6292specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6293LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6294save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6295\f
6296* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6297
6298** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6299Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6300vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6301Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6302
6303** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6304to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6305
6306In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6307don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6308"win".
6309
6310** Basic Lisp changes
6311
6312*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6313evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6314
6315*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6316be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6317or by the user.
6318
6319The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6320
6321*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6322
6323(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6324(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6325
6326*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6327usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6328its argument.
6329
6330*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6331
6332*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6333
6334*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6335
6336*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6337error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6338include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6339`format' function.
6340
6341*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6342or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6343whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6344
6345*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6346either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6347adding one of these suffixes.
6348
6349*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6350which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6351If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6352
6353We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6354because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6355
6356*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6357
6358*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6359You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6360
6361*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6362conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6363
6364 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6365
6366BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6367BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6368
6369*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6370choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6371restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6372works using `save-current-buffer'.
6373
6374*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6375write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6376of the last form.
6377
6378*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6379which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6380last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6381as the last form.
6382
6383*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6384characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6385matches.
6386
6387For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6388
6389*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6390with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6391Then it returns that string.
6392
6393For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6394
6395(with-output-to-string
6396 (princ "The buffer is ")
6397 (princ (buffer-name)))
6398
6399returns "The buffer is foo".
6400
6401** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6402is non-nil.
6403
6404These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6405buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6406characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6407
6408*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6409a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6410
6411Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6412character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6413Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6414position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6415characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6416 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6417
6418ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6419Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6420non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6421characters".
6422
6423The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6424through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6425"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6426range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6427leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6428
6429*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6430(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6431multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6432character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6433
6434This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6435always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6436
6437However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6438
a933dad1
DL
6439*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6440because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6441have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6442the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6443guaranteed.
6444
6445*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6446between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6447character).
6448
6449When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6450
6451 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6452 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6453 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6454 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6455 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6456
6457*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6458
6459*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6460`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6461more than the number of characters.
6462
6463You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6464it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6465\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6466is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6467follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6468newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6469
6470*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6471and returns a string containing those characters.
6472
6473*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6474(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6475counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6476character, sref signals an error.
6477
6478*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6479in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6480string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6481
6482*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6483in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6484region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6485
6486*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6487the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6488to a vector of the characters in it.
6489
6490*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6491of a string. You call it as follows:
6492
6493 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6494
6495This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6496STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6497This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6498Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6499it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6500
6501*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6502if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6503
6504*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6505if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6506
6507*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6508to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6509not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6510which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6511
6512(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6513
6514This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6515
6516The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6517If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6518are not included in the resulting value.
6519
6520The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6521at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6522WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6523is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6524
6525If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6526place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6527character extends across that column), then the padding character
6528PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6529string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6530column START-COLUMN.
6531
6532*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6533the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6534necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6535difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6536changed text, before the change.
6537
6538*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6539sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6540one character set for each script, not for each language.
6541
6542**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6543
6544**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6545
6546**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6547set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6548
6549**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6550name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6551which identify the character within that character set.
6552
6553**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6554byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6555opposite of split-char.
6556
6557**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6558of all the characters between BEG and END.
6559
6560**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6561of all the characters in a string.
6562
6563*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6564and specifying coding systems.
6565
6566**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6567system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6568of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6569(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6570and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6571as what to do about code conversion.)
6572
6573**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6574name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6575
6576**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6577for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6578except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6579
6580Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6581which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6582to match against a file name.
6583
6584VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6585a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6586decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6587to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6588systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6589specifies the coding system for encoding.
6590
6591If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6592or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6593
6594**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6595the coding system to use for network sockets.
6596
6597Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6598which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6599either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6600service names.
6601
6602VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6603a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6604decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6605to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6606systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6607specifies the coding system for encoding.
6608
6609If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6610or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6611
6612**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6613for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6614except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6615start the subprocess.
6616
6617**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6618systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6619when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6620(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6621to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6622
6623**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6624coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6625subprocess.
6626
6627It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6628but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6629start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6630connection permanently or until overridden.
6631
6632The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6633file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6634network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6635coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6636It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6637system for one operation at a time.
6638
6639**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6640files, subprocesses or network connections.
6641
6642**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6643coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6644The value is a cons cell,
6645 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6646where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6647the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6648input to the subprocess.
6649
6650**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6651change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6652
6653** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6654customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6655you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6656
6657You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6658variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6659information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6660legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6661customization.
6662
6663Thus, instead of writing
6664
6665 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6666 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6667
6668you would now write this:
6669
6670 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6671 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6672 :type 'boolean
6673 :group foo)
6674
6675The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6676two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6677describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6678for a description of them.
6679
6680The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6681should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6682
6683 (defgroup ispell nil
6684 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6685 :group 'processes)
6686
6687The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6688group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6689but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6690to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6691second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6692
6693Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6694package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6695have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6696package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6697first-level subgroups.
6698
6699** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6700
6701This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6702separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6703
6704** easy-mmode
6705
6706The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6707developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6708only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6709predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6710`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6711`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6712
6713** Text property changes
6714
6715*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6716text property.
6717
6718*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6719previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6720place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6721functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6722starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6723
6724If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6725LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6726of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6727position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6728
6729*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6730value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6731is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6732
6733** Changes in invisibility features
6734
6735*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6736hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6737is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6738should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6739would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6740make the overlay visible.
6741
6742During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6743invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6744needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6745which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6746the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6747t when it should hide it.
6748
6749*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6750
6751Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6752invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6753and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6754Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6755manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6756Here is an example of how to do this:
6757
6758 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6759 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6760 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6761 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6762
6763 ...
6764 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6765
6766 ...
6767 ;; When done with the overlays:
6768 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6769 ;; Or respectively:
6770 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6771
6772** Changes in syntax parsing.
6773
6774*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6775`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6776obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6777`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6778
6779If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6780is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6781used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6782
6783When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6784character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6785
6786 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6787 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6788
6789 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6790 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6791 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6792
6793 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6794 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6795 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6796 determine the syntax type of the character.
6797
6798 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6799 of the current buffer.
6800
6801*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6802value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6803for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6804
6805*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6806and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6807only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6808character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6809another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6810
6811These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6812text property.
6813
6814*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6815arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6816of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6817
6818*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6819(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6820element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6821nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6822string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6823
6824*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6825syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6826`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6827
6828** Changes in face features
6829
6830*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6831if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6832
6833*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6834of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6835
6836*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6837set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6838
6839*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6840set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6841
6842*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6843by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6844and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6845the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6846overlay property).
6847
6848This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6849arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6850
6851** Changes in file-handling functions
6852
6853*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6854directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6855they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6856is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6857
6858This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6859begins with ~.
6860
6861*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6862it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6863
6864*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6865the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6866
6867*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6868as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6869
6870*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6871character code conversion as well as other things.
6872
6873Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6874(formerly it did not).
6875
6876*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6877environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6878
6879*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6880instead of constant strings.
6881
6882*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6883to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6884any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6885
6886substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6887in the same way as before.
6888
6889*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6890The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6891which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6892
6893*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6894error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6895else, and returns nil.
6896
6897*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6898directory cannot be listed.
6899
6900** Changes in minibuffer input
6901
6902*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6903read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6904additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6905argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
6906ways:
6907
6908 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
6909 It is available through the history command M-n.
6910
6911*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
6912read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
6913argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
6914minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
6915enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
6916
6917In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
6918argument in this way.
6919
6920*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
6921from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
6922minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
6923
6924** Echo area features
6925
6926*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
6927echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
6928minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
6929after the echo area is cleared.
6930
6931*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
6932in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
6933
6934** Keyboard input features
6935
6936*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
6937set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
6938
6939*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
6940received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
6941by keyboard macros.
6942
6943** Frame-related changes
6944
6945*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
6946creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
6947hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
6948
6949*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
6950the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
6951has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
6952
6953*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6954selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
6955value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
6956in the selected frame.
6957
6958*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
6959is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
6960which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
6961
6962** X Windows features
6963
6964*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
6965x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
6966x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
6967
6968*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
6969The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
6970
6971*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
6972MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
6973A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
6974
6975If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
6976it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
6977
6978** Subprocess features
6979
6980*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
6981functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
6982automatically.
6983
6984*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
6985and returns the output from the command as a string.
6986
6987*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
6988and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
6989
6990** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
6991does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
6992
6993** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
6994at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
6995goes after the other menu items.
6996
6997** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 6998of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
6999around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7000are in use.
7001
7002The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7003series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7004
7005Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7006after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7007form.
7008
7009** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7010is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7011but its hook is still run.
7012
7013** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7014for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7015
7016If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7017regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7018useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7019
7020This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7021are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7022filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7023warned.
7024
7025** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7026way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7027
7028** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7029integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7030functions like display-time.
7031
7032** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7033name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7034
7035** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7036can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7037is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7038
7039** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7040if there is an error in compilation.
7041
7042** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7043switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7044argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7045they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7046
7047** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7048Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7049the *scratch* buffer.
7050
7051** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7052The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7053where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7054e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7055
7056** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7057and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7058It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7059
7060** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7061using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7062variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7063and compose-mail-other-frame.
7064
7065** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7066can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7067full name of the specified user will be returned.
7068
7069** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7070of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7071where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7072in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7073option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7074files at all.
7075
7076** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7077and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7078width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7079the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7080
7081For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7082minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7083with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7084is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7085
7086** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7087
7088** imenu.el changes.
7089
7090You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7091item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7092
7093An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7094#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7095select one of those items.
7096\f
7097* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7098\f
7099* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7100
7101** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7102mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7103
7104** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7105use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7106Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7107\f
7108* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7109
7110** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7111To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7112
7113** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7114conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7115matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7116expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7117word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7118all caps.
7119
7120** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7121at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7122
7123When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7124does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7125as in previous Emacs versions.
7126
7127** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7128non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7129time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7130frames.
7131
7132** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7133if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7134This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7135Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7136accident.
7137
7138** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7139keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7140It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7141line and then executing the macro.
7142
7143This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7144
7145** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7146(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7147characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7148characters.
7149
7150** Font Lock mode
7151
7152*** Font Lock support modes
7153
7154Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7155below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7156hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7157to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7158Font Lock mode is enabled.
7159
7160For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7161
7162 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7163
7164in your ~/.emacs.
7165
7166*** lazy-lock
7167
7168The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7169only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7170becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7171Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7172occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7173buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7174Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7175
7176To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7177
7178 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7179
7180To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7181
7182** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7183
7184*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7185paren and key.
7186
7187*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7188supported.
7189
7190** Gnus changes.
7191
7192Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7193commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7194significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7195previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7196
7197Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7198between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7199
79214ddf 7200*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7201variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7202obsolete.
7203
7204*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7205missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7206
7207 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7208
7209*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7210
7211 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7212
7213*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7214referred.
a933dad1
DL
7215
7216*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7217
7218 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7219
7220*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7221
7222 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7223
7224*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7225buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7226
7227 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7228
7229*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7230
7231 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7232
7233*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7234
7235 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7236
7237*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7238
7239 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7240
7241*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7242is possible.
7243
7244 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7245
7246*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7247groups of groups.
7248
7249*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7250
7251*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7252batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7253
7254*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7255
7256*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7257
7258*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7259
7260 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7261
7262*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7263expiration times.
7264
7265*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7266
7267*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7268process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7269
7270*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7271articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7272bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7273
7274*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7275articles with the `*' command.
7276
7277*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7278
7279*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7280
7281 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7282
7283*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7284
79214ddf 7285*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7286`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7287
7288*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7289buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7290
7291*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7292
7293*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7294
7295*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7296
7297 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7298
79214ddf 7299*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7300
7301 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7302
79214ddf 7303*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7304
7305*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7306
79214ddf 7307*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7308
79214ddf 7309 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7310 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7311
7312*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7313refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7314
7315 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7316
7317*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7318buffer to allow easier treatment.
7319
7320*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7321
7322*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7323
7324 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7325
7326*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7327articles.
a933dad1
DL
7328
7329 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7330
79214ddf 7331*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7332
7333*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7334cited text to hide is now customizable.
7335
7336 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7337
7338*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7339
7340 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7341
7342*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7343
7344*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7345
7346The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7347in greater detail.
7348\f
7349* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7350
7351** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7352second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7353asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7354exists.
7355
7356** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7357as well as lists.
7358
7359** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7360of a given keymap.
7361
7362** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7363given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7364keymap or nil.
7365
7366** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7367an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7368name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7369menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7370equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7371alias.
7372\f
7373* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7374
7375** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7376
7377Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7378This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7379was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7380far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7381pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7382
7383For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7384you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7385`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7386
7387** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7388
7389The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7390do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7391It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7392much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7393chapter of the manual for details.
7394
7395However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7396customization variables take effect.
7397
7398** Marking with the mouse.
7399
7400When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7401highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7402using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7403
7404** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7405
7406*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7407
7408*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7409to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7410
7411*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7412in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7413you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7414application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7415applications, these problems are significant.
7416
7417If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7418likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7419However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7420will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7421other DOS application as a subprocess.
7422
7423Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7424You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7425
7426If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7427subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7428have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7429Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7430separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7431Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7432
7433** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7434
7435This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7436which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7437minibuffer contains.
7438
7439** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7440
7441The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7442It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7443It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7444affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7445
7446The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7447it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7448and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7449when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7450
7451** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7452enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7453
7454** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7455F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7456Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7457
7458If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7459menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7460something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7461the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7462
7463 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7464
7465** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7466to replace the characters it "deletes".
7467
7468** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7469
7470** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7471a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7472select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7473It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7474immediately after the selected one.
7475
7476This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7477made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7478
7479** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7480
7481Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7482directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7483If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7484Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7485recover-session.
7486
7487You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7488auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7489will not work.
7490
7491Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7492normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7493this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7494bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7495now that the bug is fixed.
7496
7497** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7498
7499There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7500when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7501Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7502which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7503
7504If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7505telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7506VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7507the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7508
7509** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7510Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7511is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7512
7513There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7514Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7515enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7516The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7517remain normal.
7518
7519** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7520header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7521
7522Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7523known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7524offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7525Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7526
7527Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7528of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7529a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7530name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7531documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7532`mail-directory-stream'.)
7533
7534** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7535skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7536characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7537with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7538
7539Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7540- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7541wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7542
7543The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7544less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7545headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7546Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7547Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7548fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7549to a limitation in font-lock).
7550
7551External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7552
7553** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7554buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7555buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7556this example:
7557
7558 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7559 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7560
7561** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7562
7563*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7564
7565*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7566
7567*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7568
7569*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7570entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7571will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7572isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7573(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7574The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7575
7576*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7577does the same job.
7578
7579*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7580"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7581
7582*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7583text.
7584
7585** Font Lock mode
7586
7587*** Global Font Lock mode
7588
7589Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7590new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7591font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7592turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7593on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7594
7595For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7596
7597 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7598
7599in your ~/.emacs.
7600
7601*** Local Refontification
7602
7603In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7604However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7605those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7606command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7607
7608In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7609(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7610current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7611above and below point.
7612
7613With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7614
7615** Follow mode
7616
7617Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7618buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7619side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7620they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7621split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7622follow-mode.
7623
7624M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7625
7626To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7627command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7628
7629** hide-show changes.
7630
7631The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7632to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7633normal hooks.
7634
7635** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7636The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7637
7638** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7639recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7640those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7641
7642** MSDOS Changes
7643
7644*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7645Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7646
7647*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7648and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7649
7650*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7651
7652*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7653pressing both mouse buttons.
7654
7655*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7656restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7657are:
a933dad1
DL
7658
7659**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7660now works.
7661
7662**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7663
7664**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7665implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7666
7667**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7668
7669**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7670
7671**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7672
7673**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7674
7675**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7676\f
7677* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7678
7679** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7680tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7681remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7682this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7683behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7684
7685** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7686
7687The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7688not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7689need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7690be different.
7691
7692It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7693than `system-type'.
7694
7695See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7696
7697** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7698now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7699
7700** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7701that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7702
7703** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7704no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7705reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7706
7707The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7708to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7709like this:
7710
7711 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7712
7713SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7714It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7715becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7716
7717REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7718seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7719means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7720
7721*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7722up if too much time passes.
7723
7724 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7725
7726This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7727If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7728of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7729form in BODY.
7730
7731*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7732a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7733call looks like this:
7734
7735 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7736
7737SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7738runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7739timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7740ARGS.
7741
7742Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7743command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7744command.
7745
7746REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7747time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7748does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7749each time Emacs becomes idle.
7750
7751If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7752idle for SECS seconds.
7753
7754*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7755all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7756programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7757instead.
7758
7759*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7760there is no answer within a certain time.
7761
7762 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7763
7764asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7765within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7766Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7767
7768** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7769arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7770meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7771arguments in between are ignored.
7772
7773This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7774the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7775
7776** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7777/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7778/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7779site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7780version.
7781
7782It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7783version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7784for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7785has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7786and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7787problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7788
7789** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7790.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7791systems with limited file name syntax.
7792
7793Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7794convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7795for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7796completions.el:
7797
7798(defvar save-completions-file-name
7799 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7800 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7801
7802This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7803depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7804convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7805Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7806MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7807
7808** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7809rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7810minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7811
7812** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7813marker from its buffer position.
7814
7815** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7816Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7817The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7818
7819** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7820that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7821condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7822of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7823matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7824regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7825
7826This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7827errors that happen often during editing.
7828
7829** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7830into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7831puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7832
7833** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7834now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7835
7836** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7837a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7838name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7839to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7840and not get-buffer-window.
7841
7842** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7843calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7844being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7845
7846If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7847buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7848property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7849non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7850are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7851property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7852over and over for the same text.
7853
7854** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7855
7856*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7857in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7858
7859;; @(#) HEADER: text
7860;; $HEADER: text $
7861
7862in addition to the normal
7863
7864;; HEADER: text
7865
7866*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7867checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7868lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7869\f
7870* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7871
7872----------------------------------------------------------------------
7873Copyright information:
7874
404fa7d6 7875Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7876
7877 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7878 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7879 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7880 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7881
7882 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7883 of this document, or of portions of it,
7884 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7885 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7886\f
7887Local variables:
7888mode: outline
7889paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7890end: